mirror of
				https://sourceware.org/git/glibc.git
				synced 2025-10-30 10:45:40 +03:00 
			
		
		
		
	
		
			
				
	
	
		
			5993 lines
		
	
	
		
			196 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			TeX
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			5993 lines
		
	
	
		
			196 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			TeX
		
	
	
	
	
	
| % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
 | |
| \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\texinfoversion{1999-10-01.07}
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
 | |
| % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 | |
| % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
 | |
| % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
 | |
| % your option) any later version.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
 | |
| % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
 | |
| % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
 | |
| % General Public License for more details.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 | |
| % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
 | |
| % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
 | |
| % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
 | |
| % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
 | |
| % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
 | |
| % reports; you can get the latest version from:
 | |
| %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
 | |
| %   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
 | |
| %   ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
 | |
| %   ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
 | |
| %   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
 | |
| %   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
 | |
| % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
 | |
| % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
 | |
| % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
 | |
| % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
 | |
| % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
 | |
| % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
 | |
| % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
 | |
| %   tex foo.texi
 | |
| %   texindex foo.??
 | |
| %   tex foo.texi
 | |
| %   tex foo.texi
 | |
| %   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
 | |
| % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
 | |
| % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
 | |
| % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
 | |
| % the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
 | |
| % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
 | |
| % they might have appeared in the input file name.
 | |
| \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
 | |
|   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
 | |
| \let\ptexb=\b
 | |
| \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
 | |
| \let\ptexc=\c
 | |
| \let\ptexcomma=\,
 | |
| \let\ptexdot=\.
 | |
| \let\ptexdots=\dots
 | |
| \let\ptexend=\end
 | |
| \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
 | |
| \let\ptexexclam=\!
 | |
| \let\ptexi=\i
 | |
| \let\ptexlbrace=\{
 | |
| \let\ptexrbrace=\}
 | |
| \let\ptexstar=\*
 | |
| \let\ptext=\t
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
 | |
| % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
 | |
| \let\+ = \relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{Basics,}
 | |
| \chardef\other=12
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
 | |
| % starts a new line in the output.
 | |
| \newlinechar = `^^J
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
 | |
| \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
 | |
| %
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
 | |
| %
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
 | |
| \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Ignore a token.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\gobble#1{}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
 | |
| \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
 | |
| \hyphenation{eshell}
 | |
| \hyphenation{white-space}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
 | |
| \newdimen \bindingoffset
 | |
| \newdimen \normaloffset
 | |
| \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
 | |
| % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
 | |
| % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
 | |
| \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
 | |
| \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
 | |
|    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
 | |
|    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
 | |
|    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
 | |
| }%
 | |
| \else
 | |
| \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
 | |
|    \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
 | |
|    \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
 | |
|    \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
 | |
|    \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
 | |
|    \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
 | |
| }%
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| % For @cropmarks command.
 | |
| % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newif\ifcropmarks
 | |
| \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
 | |
| % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
 | |
| \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
 | |
| \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
 | |
| \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Main output routine.
 | |
| \chardef\PAGE = 255
 | |
| \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newbox\headlinebox
 | |
| \newbox\footlinebox
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
 | |
| % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
 | |
| \def\onepageout#1{%
 | |
|   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
 | |
|   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
 | |
|   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
 | |
|   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
 | |
|   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
 | |
|     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
 | |
|     % before the \shipout runs.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
 | |
|     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
 | |
|     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
 | |
|                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
 | |
|     \shipout\vbox{%
 | |
|       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
 | |
|         \hsize = \outerhsize
 | |
|         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
 | |
|         \vtop to0pt{%
 | |
|           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
 | |
|           \nointerlineskip
 | |
|           \line{%
 | |
|             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
 | |
|             \hfill
 | |
|             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
 | |
|           }%
 | |
|           \vss}%
 | |
|         \vskip\topandbottommargin
 | |
|         \line\bgroup
 | |
|           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
 | |
|           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
 | |
|           \vbox\bgroup
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       \unvbox\headlinebox
 | |
|       \pagebody{#1}%
 | |
|       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
 | |
|         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
 | |
|         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
 | |
|         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
 | |
|         \vskip 2\baselineskip
 | |
|         \unvbox\footlinebox
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       \ifcropmarks
 | |
|           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
 | |
|         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
 | |
|         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
 | |
|         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
 | |
|         \vbox to0pt{\vss
 | |
|           \line{%
 | |
|             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
 | |
|             \hfill
 | |
|             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
 | |
|           }%
 | |
|           \nointerlineskip
 | |
|           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
 | |
|         }%
 | |
|       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     }% end of \shipout\vbox
 | |
|   }% end of group with \turnoffactive
 | |
|   \advancepageno
 | |
|   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
 | |
| {\catcode`\@ =11
 | |
| \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
 | |
| % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
 | |
| \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
 | |
|   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
 | |
| \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
 | |
| \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
 | |
| \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
 | |
| % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
 | |
| % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
 | |
| \def\nstop{\vbox
 | |
|   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
 | |
| \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
 | |
| \def\nsbot{\vbox
 | |
|   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
 | |
| % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
 | |
| % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\parsearg#1{%
 | |
|   \let\next = #1%
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \obeylines
 | |
|     \futurelet\temp\parseargx
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
 | |
| % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
 | |
| \def\parseargx{%
 | |
|   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
 | |
|   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
 | |
|     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \expandafter\parseargline
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
 | |
| {\obeyspaces %
 | |
|  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\obeylines %
 | |
|   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
 | |
|     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
 | |
|     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
 | |
|     \argremovec #1\c\relax %
 | |
|     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
 | |
|     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
 | |
| % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
 | |
| % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
 | |
| % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
 | |
| \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
 | |
| \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
 | |
| %    @end itemize  @c foo
 | |
| % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
 | |
| % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
 | |
| % result to \toks0.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
 | |
| % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
 | |
| % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
 | |
| % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
 | |
| % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
 | |
| % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
 | |
| % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \ignoreactivespaces
 | |
|     \edef\temp{#1}%
 | |
|     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \begingroup
 | |
|   \obeyspaces
 | |
|   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
 | |
| \endgroup
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
 | |
| %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
 | |
| \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
 | |
| \def\ENVcheck{%
 | |
| \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
 | |
| \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
 | |
| \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\beginxxx #1{%
 | |
| \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
 | |
| {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
 | |
| \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
 | |
| \def\endxxx #1{%
 | |
|   \removeactivespaces{#1}%
 | |
|   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
 | |
|       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
 | |
|       \errhelp = \EMsimple
 | |
|       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \unmatchedenderror\endthing
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
 | |
|     \csname E\endthing\endcsname
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
 | |
|   \errhelp = \EMsimple
 | |
|   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
 | |
|   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
 | |
| % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
 | |
| \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
 | |
| \def\singlespace{%
 | |
|   % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
 | |
|   % environments.  --karl, 6may93
 | |
|   %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
 | |
|   %\kern \baselineskip}%
 | |
|   \setleading \singlespaceskip
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| %% Simple single-character @ commands
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @@ prints an @
 | |
| % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
 | |
| \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This is turned off because it was never documented
 | |
| % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
 | |
| %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
 | |
| %% but suppressing ligatures.
 | |
| %\def\`{{`}}
 | |
| %\def\'{{'}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Used to generate quoted braces.
 | |
| \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
 | |
| \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
 | |
| \let\{=\mylbrace
 | |
| \let\}=\myrbrace
 | |
| \begingroup
 | |
|   % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
 | |
|   \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
 | |
|   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
 | |
|   \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
 | |
|   @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
 | |
|   @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
 | |
| @endgroup
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
 | |
| % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
 | |
| \let\, = \c
 | |
| \let\dotaccent = \.
 | |
| \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
 | |
| \let\tieaccent = \t
 | |
| \let\ubaraccent = \b
 | |
| \let\udotaccent = \d
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
 | |
| % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
 | |
| \def\questiondown{?`}
 | |
| \def\exclamdown{!`}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
 | |
| \def\imacro{i}
 | |
| \def\jmacro{j}
 | |
| \def\dotless#1{%
 | |
|   \def\temp{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
 | |
|   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
 | |
|   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
 | |
|   \fi\fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
 | |
| % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
 | |
| % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
 | |
| % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
 | |
| % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
 | |
| {\catcode`@ = 11
 | |
|  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
 | |
|  % if the definition is written into an index file.
 | |
|  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
 | |
|  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
 | |
| \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @* forces a line break.
 | |
| \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
 | |
| \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
 | |
| \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
 | |
| \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
 | |
| % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
 | |
| % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
 | |
| \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
 | |
| % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
 | |
| % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
 | |
| % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
 | |
| % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
 | |
| % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
 | |
| % the text is small, which looks bad.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\group{\begingroup
 | |
|   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
 | |
|     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
 | |
|     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
 | |
|   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
 | |
|   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
 | |
|   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
 | |
|   % above.  But it's pretty close.
 | |
|   \def\Egroup{%
 | |
|     \egroup           % End the \vtop.
 | |
|     \endgroup         % End the \group.
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \vtop\bgroup
 | |
|     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
 | |
|     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
 | |
|     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
 | |
|     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
 | |
|     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
 | |
|     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
 | |
|     \everypar = {\strut}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
 | |
|     % normal interline spacing.
 | |
|     \offinterlineskip
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
 | |
|     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
 | |
|     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
 | |
|     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
 | |
|     % empty paragraph.
 | |
|     \ifx\par\lisppar
 | |
|       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
 | |
|       \obeylines
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
 | |
|     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
 | |
|     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
 | |
|     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
 | |
|     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
 | |
|     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
 | |
|     \comment
 | |
| }
 | |
| %
 | |
| % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
 | |
| % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
 | |
| group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
 | |
| where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @need space-in-mils
 | |
| % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Old definition--didn't work.
 | |
| %\def\needx #1{\par %
 | |
| %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
 | |
| %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
 | |
| %{\baselineskip=0pt%
 | |
| %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
 | |
| %\prevdepth=-1000pt
 | |
| %}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\needx#1{%
 | |
|   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
 | |
|   % paragraph.
 | |
|   \par
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
 | |
|   \dimen0 = #1\mil
 | |
|   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
 | |
|   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
 | |
|   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
 | |
|     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
 | |
|     % And a page break here is fine.
 | |
|     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
 | |
|     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
 | |
|     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
 | |
|     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
 | |
|     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
 | |
|     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
 | |
|     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
 | |
|     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
 | |
|     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
 | |
|     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
 | |
|     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
 | |
|     \penalty9999
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
 | |
|     \kern -#1\mil
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
 | |
|     \nobreak
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @br   forces paragraph break
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\br = \par
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
 | |
| % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
 | |
| % font as three actual period characters.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\dots{%
 | |
|   \leavevmode
 | |
|   \hbox to 1.5em{%
 | |
|     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
 | |
|     .\hss.\hss.%
 | |
|     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\enddots{%
 | |
|   \leavevmode
 | |
|   \hbox to 2em{%
 | |
|     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
 | |
|     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
 | |
|     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \spacefactor=3000
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @page    forces the start of a new page
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @exdent text....
 | |
| % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
 | |
| % That's how much \exdent should take out.
 | |
| \newskip\exdentamount
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
 | |
| \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
 | |
| \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
 | |
| \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
 | |
| \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
 | |
| \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\inmargin#1{%
 | |
| \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
 | |
|   \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
 | |
|   \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
 | |
| \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
 | |
| \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @include file    insert text of that file as input.
 | |
| % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
 | |
| \def\include{\begingroup
 | |
|   \catcode`\\=12
 | |
|   \catcode`~=12
 | |
|   \catcode`^=12
 | |
|   \catcode`_=12
 | |
|   \catcode`|=12
 | |
|   \catcode`<=12
 | |
|   \catcode`>=12
 | |
|   \catcode`+=12
 | |
|   \parsearg\includezzz}
 | |
| % Restore active chars for included file.
 | |
| \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
 | |
|   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
 | |
|   \def\thisfile{#1}%
 | |
|   \input\thisfile
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\thisfile{}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @center line   outputs that line, centered
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
 | |
| \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
 | |
| \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
 | |
| \centerline{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
 | |
| \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @comment ...line which is ignored...
 | |
| % @c is the same as @comment
 | |
| % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
 | |
| \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
 | |
| \commentxxx}
 | |
| {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\c=\comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @paragraphindent NCHARS
 | |
| % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
 | |
| % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
 | |
| % 
 | |
| \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
 | |
| \def\noneword{none}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
 | |
| \def\doparagraphindent#1{%
 | |
|   \def\temp{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\temp\asisword
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \ifx\temp\noneword
 | |
|       \defaultparindent = 0pt
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \defaultparindent = #1em
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \parindent = \defaultparindent
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @exampleindent NCHARS
 | |
| % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
 | |
| % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
 | |
| % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
 | |
| \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
 | |
| \def\doexampleindent#1{%
 | |
|   \def\temp{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\temp\asisword
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \ifx\temp\noneword
 | |
|       \lispnarrowing = 0pt
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \lispnarrowing = #1em
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\asis#1{#1}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @math means output in math mode.
 | |
| % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
 | |
| % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
 | |
| % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
 | |
| % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
 | |
| % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
 | |
| % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \let\implicitmath = $
 | |
| \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
 | |
| \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
 | |
| \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @refill is a no-op.
 | |
| \let\refill=\relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
 | |
| % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
 | |
| % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
 | |
| \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
 | |
| % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
 | |
| % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
 | |
| \def\setfilename{%
 | |
|    \iflinks
 | |
|      \readauxfile
 | |
|    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
 | |
|    \openindices
 | |
|    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
 | |
|    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
 | |
|    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
 | |
|    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
 | |
|    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
 | |
|    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
 | |
|    \closein1
 | |
|    \temp
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Called from \setfilename.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\openindices{%
 | |
|   \newindex{cp}%
 | |
|   \newcodeindex{fn}%
 | |
|   \newcodeindex{vr}%
 | |
|   \newcodeindex{tp}%
 | |
|   \newcodeindex{ky}%
 | |
|   \newcodeindex{pg}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @bye.
 | |
| \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{pdf,}
 | |
| % adobe `portable' document format
 | |
| \newcount\tempnum
 | |
| \newcount\lnkcount
 | |
| \newtoks\filename
 | |
| \newcount\filenamelength
 | |
| \newcount\pgn
 | |
| \newtoks\toksA
 | |
| \newtoks\toksB
 | |
| \newtoks\toksC
 | |
| \newtoks\toksD
 | |
| \newbox\boxA
 | |
| \newcount\countA
 | |
| \newif\ifpdf
 | |
| \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
 | |
| 
 | |
| \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
 | |
|   \pdffalse
 | |
|   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
 | |
|   \let\pdfurl = \gobble
 | |
|   \let\endlink = \relax
 | |
|   \let\linkcolor = \relax
 | |
|   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \pdftrue
 | |
|   \pdfoutput = 1
 | |
|   \input pdfcolor
 | |
|   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
 | |
|     \def\imagewidth{#2}%
 | |
|     \def\imageheight{#3}%
 | |
|     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
 | |
|       \pdfimage
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \pdfximage
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
 | |
|       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
 | |
|       {#1.pdf}%
 | |
|     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
 | |
|       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
 | |
|     \fi}
 | |
|   \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
 | |
|   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
 | |
|   \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
 | |
|   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
 | |
|   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
 | |
|   % come from Petr Olsak
 | |
|   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
 | |
|     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
 | |
|   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
 | |
|     \advance\tempnum by1
 | |
|     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
 | |
|   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
 | |
|     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
 | |
|     \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
 | |
|       \closein 1 
 | |
|       \indexnofonts
 | |
|       \def\tt{}
 | |
|       % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
 | |
|       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
 | |
|       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \input \jobname.toc
 | |
|       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
 | |
|         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
 | |
|       \input \jobname.toc
 | |
|     \egroup\fi
 | |
|   }}
 | |
|   \def\makelinks #1,{%
 | |
|     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
 | |
|     \ifx\params\E
 | |
|       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
 | |
|       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
 | |
|       \picknum{#1}%
 | |
|       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
 | |
|         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
 | |
|       \linkcolor #1%
 | |
|       \advance\lnkcount by 1%
 | |
|       \endlink
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \nextmakelinks
 | |
|   }
 | |
|   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
 | |
|   \def\pn#1{%
 | |
|     \def\p{#1}%
 | |
|     \ifx\p\lbrace
 | |
|       \let\nextpn=\ppn
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \let\nextpn=\ppnn
 | |
|       \def\first{#1}
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \nextpn
 | |
|   }
 | |
|   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
 | |
|   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
 | |
|   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
 | |
|   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
 | |
|   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
 | |
|     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
 | |
|     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
 | |
|       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
 | |
|         \advance\filenamelength by 1
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \nextsp}
 | |
|   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
 | |
|   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
 | |
|     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \def\pdfurl#1{%
 | |
|     \begingroup
 | |
|       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
 | |
|       \leavevmode\Red
 | |
|       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 | |
|         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
 | |
|         % #1
 | |
|     \endgroup}
 | |
|   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
 | |
|   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
 | |
|   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
 | |
|   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
 | |
|   \def\maketoks{%
 | |
|     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
 | |
|     \ifx\first0\adn0
 | |
|     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
 | |
|     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
 | |
|     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
 | |
|       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
 | |
|         \let\next=\maketoks
 | |
|         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
 | |
|         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 | |
|     \next}
 | |
|   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
 | |
|     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
 | |
|   \def\pdflink#1{%
 | |
|     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
 | |
|     \linkcolor #1\endlink}
 | |
|   \def\mkpgn#1{#1@} 
 | |
|   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
 | |
| \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{fonts,}
 | |
| % Font-change commands.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
 | |
| % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
 | |
| \newfam\sffam
 | |
| \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
 | |
| \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We don't need math for this one.
 | |
| \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
 | |
| \newcount\mainmagstep
 | |
| \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
 | |
| % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
 | |
| % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
 | |
| \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use cm as the default font prefix.
 | |
| % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
 | |
| % before you read in texinfo.tex.
 | |
| \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
 | |
| \def\fontprefix{cm}
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
 | |
| \def\rmshape{r}
 | |
| \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
 | |
| \def\bfshape{b}
 | |
| \def\bxshape{bx}
 | |
| \def\ttshape{tt}
 | |
| \def\ttbshape{tt}
 | |
| \def\ttslshape{sltt}
 | |
| \def\itshape{ti}
 | |
| \def\itbshape{bxti}
 | |
| \def\slshape{sl}
 | |
| \def\slbshape{bxsl}
 | |
| \def\sfshape{ss}
 | |
| \def\sfbshape{ss}
 | |
| \def\scshape{csc}
 | |
| \def\scbshape{csc}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \ifx\bigger\relax
 | |
| \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
 | |
| \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
 | |
| \else
 | |
| \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
 | |
| % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
 | |
| % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
 | |
| \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
 | |
| \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
 | |
| \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
 | |
| 
 | |
| % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
 | |
| \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
 | |
| \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
 | |
| \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
 | |
| \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
 | |
| \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
 | |
| \font\smalli=cmmi9
 | |
| \font\smallsy=cmsy9
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Fonts for title page:
 | |
| \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 | |
| \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 | |
| \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
 | |
| \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \let\titlebf=\titlerm
 | |
| \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
 | |
| \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
 | |
| \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
 | |
| \def\authorrm{\secrm}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
 | |
| \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
 | |
| \let\chapbf=\chaprm
 | |
| \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
 | |
| \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
 | |
| \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Section fonts (14.4pt).
 | |
| \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \let\secbf\secrm
 | |
| \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
 | |
| \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
 | |
| \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
 | |
| % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
 | |
| % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
 | |
| % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
 | |
| % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
 | |
| %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
 | |
| %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
 | |
| %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
 | |
| %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
 | |
| \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 | |
| \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
 | |
| \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
 | |
| \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 | |
| \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
 | |
| \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
 | |
| \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
 | |
| \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
 | |
| \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
 | |
| \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
 | |
| % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
 | |
| % but that is not a standard magnification.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
 | |
| % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
 | |
| % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
 | |
| % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
 | |
| % also require loading a lot more fonts).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\resetmathfonts{%
 | |
|   \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
 | |
|   \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
 | |
|   \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
 | |
| % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
 | |
| % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
 | |
| % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
 | |
| % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
 | |
| % redefine \bf itself.
 | |
| \def\textfonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts}
 | |
| \def\titlefonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
 | |
|   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
 | |
| \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
 | |
| \def\chapfonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
 | |
| \def\secfonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
 | |
| \def\subsecfonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
 | |
| \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
 | |
| \def\smallfonts{%
 | |
|   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
 | |
|   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
 | |
|   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
 | |
|   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
 | |
|   \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \textfonts
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
 | |
| \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
 | |
| \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
 | |
| \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Fonts for short table of contents.
 | |
| \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
 | |
| \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
 | |
| %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
 | |
| % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
 | |
| \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
 | |
| \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 | |
| \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\i=\smartitalic
 | |
| \let\var=\smartslanted
 | |
| \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 | |
| \let\emph=\smartitalic
 | |
| \let\cite=\smartslanted
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
 | |
| \let\strong=\b
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
 | |
| % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
 | |
| % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
 | |
| \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\t#1{%
 | |
|   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
 | |
|   \null
 | |
| }
 | |
| \let\ttfont=\t
 | |
| \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
 | |
| \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
 | |
| \font\keysy=cmsy9
 | |
| \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
 | |
|   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
 | |
|     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
 | |
|      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
 | |
|     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
 | |
|   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
 | |
| % The old definition, with no lozenge:
 | |
| %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
 | |
| \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
 | |
| \let\file=\samp
 | |
| \let\option=\samp
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @code is a modification of @t,
 | |
| % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
 | |
| \def\tclose#1{%
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
 | |
|     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Switch to typewriter.
 | |
|     \tt
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
 | |
|     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Turn off hyphenation.
 | |
|     \nohyphenation
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \rawbackslash
 | |
|     \frenchspacing
 | |
|     #1%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \null
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
 | |
| % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 | |
| % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
 | |
| % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
 | |
| % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
 | |
| % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
 | |
| %  -- rms.
 | |
| {
 | |
|   \catcode`\-=\active
 | |
|   \catcode`\_=\active
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \global\def\code{\begingroup
 | |
|     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
 | |
|     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
 | |
|     \codex
 | |
|   }
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
 | |
|   % just treat them as a normal -.
 | |
|   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\realdash{-}
 | |
| \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
 | |
| \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
 | |
| \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
 | |
| % then @kbd has no effect.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
 | |
| %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
 | |
| %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
 | |
| \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
 | |
| \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
 | |
|   \def\arg{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\arg\worddistinct
 | |
|     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
 | |
|   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
 | |
|     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
 | |
|   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
 | |
|     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
 | |
|   \fi\fi\fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\worddistinct{distinct}
 | |
| \def\wordexample{example}
 | |
| \def\wordcode{code}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
 | |
| % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
 | |
| \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\xkey{\key}
 | |
| \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
 | |
| \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
 | |
| \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
 | |
| \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
 | |
| \let\url=\code
 | |
| \let\env=\code
 | |
| \let\command=\code
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
 | |
| % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
 | |
| % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
 | |
| % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
 | |
| % a hypertex \special here.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
 | |
| \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
 | |
|   \unsepspaces
 | |
|   \pdfurl{#1}%
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
 | |
|   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
 | |
|     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
 | |
|     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
 | |
|       \ifpdf
 | |
|         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \endlink
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
 | |
| % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
 | |
| % 
 | |
| %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
 | |
| \ifpdf
 | |
|   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
 | |
|   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
 | |
|     \unsepspaces
 | |
|     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
 | |
|     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
 | |
|     \endlink
 | |
|   \endgroup}
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \let\email=\uref
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
 | |
| % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
 | |
| % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
 | |
| % this property, we can check that font parameter.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
 | |
| % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
 | |
| % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
 | |
| % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
 | |
| %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
 | |
| \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
 | |
| \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
 | |
| \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
 | |
| \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
 | |
| \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{page headings,}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
 | |
| \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
 | |
| 
 | |
| % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
 | |
| \newif\ifseenauthor
 | |
| \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
 | |
| % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
 | |
|  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 | |
| \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
 | |
|  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
 | |
| \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
 | |
|         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
 | |
|    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
 | |
|    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
 | |
|    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % Now you can print the title using @title.
 | |
|    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
 | |
|    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
 | |
|                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.
 | |
|                     \finishedtitlepagefalse
 | |
|                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
 | |
|    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
 | |
|    \finishedtitlepagetrue
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
 | |
|    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
 | |
|    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % @author should come last, but may come many times.
 | |
|    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
 | |
|    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
 | |
|       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
 | |
|    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
 | |
|    \let\oldpage = \page
 | |
|    \def\page{%
 | |
|       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
 | |
|          \finishtitlepage
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|       \oldpage
 | |
|       \let\page = \oldpage
 | |
|       \hbox{}}%
 | |
| %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Etitlepage{%
 | |
|    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
 | |
|       \finishtitlepage
 | |
|    \fi
 | |
|    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
 | |
|    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
 | |
|    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
 | |
|    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
 | |
|    \oldpage
 | |
|    \endgroup
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
 | |
|    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
 | |
|      \shortcontents
 | |
|      \contents
 | |
|      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
 | |
|      \global\let\contents = \relax
 | |
|    \fi
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
 | |
|      \contents
 | |
|      \global\let\contents = \relax
 | |
|      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
 | |
|    \fi
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    \HEADINGSon
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\finishtitlepage{%
 | |
|    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
 | |
|    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
 | |
|    \finishedtitlepagetrue
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| %%% Set up page headings and footings.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\thispage=\folio
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
 | |
| \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
 | |
| \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 | |
| \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Now make Tex use those variables
 | |
| \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
 | |
|                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 | |
| \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
 | |
|                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
 | |
| \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Commands to set those variables.
 | |
| % For example, this is what  @headings on  does
 | |
| % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
 | |
| % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
 | |
| % @evenfooting @thisfile||
 | |
| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
 | |
| \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
 | |
| \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
 | |
| \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
 | |
| \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\catcode`\@=0 %
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 | |
| \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 | |
| \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 | |
| \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 | |
| \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
 | |
| \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
 | |
|   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
 | |
|   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
 | |
|   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
 | |
|   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
 | |
| %
 | |
| }% unbind the catcode of @.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
 | |
| % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
 | |
| % @headings off         turns them off.
 | |
| % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
 | |
| % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
 | |
| % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
 | |
| % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
 | |
| % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
 | |
| % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSoff{
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
 | |
| \HEADINGSoff
 | |
| % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
 | |
| % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
 | |
| % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
 | |
| % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
 | |
| % edge of all pages.
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSdouble{
 | |
| \global\pageno=1
 | |
| \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 | |
| }
 | |
| \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 | |
| 
 | |
| % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
 | |
| % page number on top right.
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSsingle{
 | |
| \global\pageno=1
 | |
| \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
 | |
| \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
 | |
| \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
 | |
| \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
 | |
| \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
 | |
| \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subroutines used in generating headings
 | |
| % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
 | |
| \def\today{%
 | |
|   \number\day\space
 | |
|   \ifcase\month
 | |
|   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
 | |
|   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
 | |
|   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \space\number\year}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
 | |
| % It generates no output of its own.
 | |
| \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
 | |
| \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
 | |
| \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{tables,}
 | |
| % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
 | |
| 
 | |
| % default indentation of table text
 | |
| \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
 | |
| % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
 | |
| \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
 | |
| % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
 | |
| \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
 | |
| 
 | |
| % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
 | |
| \newdimen\itemmax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
 | |
| % these defs.
 | |
| % They also define \itemindex
 | |
| % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
 | |
| \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
 | |
| \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
 | |
| \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
 | |
|                  \itemzzz {#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
 | |
|                  \itemzzz {#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
 | |
|   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
 | |
|   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
 | |
|   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
 | |
|   \itemindex{#1}%
 | |
|   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
 | |
|   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
 | |
|   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
 | |
|   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
 | |
|   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
 | |
|   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
 | |
|     % but leave it ragged-right.
 | |
|     \begingroup
 | |
|       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
 | |
|       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
 | |
|       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
 | |
|       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
 | |
|     \endgroup
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
 | |
|     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
 | |
|     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
 | |
|     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
 | |
|     % \baselineskip glue.
 | |
|     \nobreak
 | |
|     \endgroup
 | |
|     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
 | |
|     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
 | |
|     \noindent
 | |
|     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
 | |
|     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
 | |
|     % eventually be printed.
 | |
|     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
 | |
|     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
 | |
|     \unhbox0
 | |
|     \nobreak\kern\dimen0
 | |
|     \endgroup
 | |
|     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
 | |
| \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
 | |
| \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
 | |
| \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
 | |
| \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
 | |
| \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
 | |
| \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
 | |
| \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
 | |
| {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 | |
| \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
 | |
| \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
 | |
| {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 | |
| \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
 | |
| \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
 | |
| \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 | |
| \let\Etable=\relax}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
 | |
| {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
 | |
| \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
 | |
| \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
 | |
| \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 | |
| \let\Etable=\relax}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\dontindex #1{}
 | |
| \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
 | |
| \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\obeyspaces %
 | |
| \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
 | |
| \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 | |
| \aboveenvbreak %
 | |
| \begingroup %
 | |
| \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
 | |
| \let\itemindex=#1%
 | |
| \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
 | |
| \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
 | |
| \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
 | |
| \def\itemfont{#2}%
 | |
| \itemmax=\tableindent %
 | |
| \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
 | |
| \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
 | |
| \exdentamount=\tableindent
 | |
| \parindent = 0pt
 | |
| \parskip = \smallskipamount
 | |
| \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
 | |
| \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 | |
| \let\item = \internalBitem %
 | |
| \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
 | |
| \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
 | |
| \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
 | |
| \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
 | |
| \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount \itemno
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemizezzz #1{%
 | |
|   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
 | |
|   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemizey #1#2{%
 | |
| \aboveenvbreak %
 | |
| \itemmax=\itemindent %
 | |
| \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
 | |
| \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
 | |
| \exdentamount=\itemindent
 | |
| \parindent = 0pt %
 | |
| \parskip = \smallskipamount %
 | |
| \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
 | |
| \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
 | |
| \def\itemcontents{#1}%
 | |
| \let\item=\itemizeitem}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
 | |
| % These are `.?!:;,'
 | |
| \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
 | |
|   \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
 | |
| % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
 | |
| % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
 | |
| % argument is the same as `1'.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
 | |
| \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
 | |
| \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
 | |
|   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
 | |
|   \def\thearg{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
 | |
|   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
 | |
|   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
 | |
|   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
 | |
|   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
 | |
|   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
 | |
|   \ifx\rest\empty
 | |
|     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
 | |
|     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
 | |
|     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
 | |
|     %   not equal to itself.
 | |
|     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
 | |
|     % continuing to look for a <number>.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
 | |
|       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       % It's a letter.
 | |
|       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
 | |
|         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
 | |
|     \numericenumerate
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
 | |
| % given in \thearg.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\numericenumerate{%
 | |
|   \itemno = \thearg
 | |
|   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
 | |
| \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
 | |
|   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
 | |
|   \startenumeration{%
 | |
|     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
 | |
|     \ifnum\itemno=0
 | |
|       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
 | |
|                   alphabet}%
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \char\lccode\itemno
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
 | |
| \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
 | |
|   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
 | |
|   \startenumeration{%
 | |
|     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
 | |
|     \ifnum\itemno=0
 | |
|       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
 | |
|                   alphabet}
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \char\uccode\itemno
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
 | |
| % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
 | |
| % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\startenumeration#1{%
 | |
|   \advance\itemno by -1
 | |
|   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
 | |
| % to @enumerate.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
 | |
| \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
 | |
| \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 | |
| \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\itemizeitem{%
 | |
| \advance\itemno by 1
 | |
| {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
 | |
| \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
 | |
| {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
 | |
| \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
 | |
| \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
 | |
| \flushcr}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @multitable macros
 | |
| % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
 | |
| %
 | |
| % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
 | |
| % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
 | |
| % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
 | |
| % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % To make preamble:
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
 | |
| %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
 | |
| %   @item ...
 | |
| %
 | |
| %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
 | |
| %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
 | |
| %   columns as desired.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Or use a template:
 | |
| %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 | |
| %   @item ...
 | |
| %   using the widest term desired in each column.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
 | |
| % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
 | |
| % will parse correctly, i.e.,
 | |
| %
 | |
| %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
 | |
| %      template}
 | |
| % Not:
 | |
| %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
 | |
| %      {Column 3 template}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
 | |
| % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
 | |
| % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
 | |
| % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
 | |
| % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Sample multitable:
 | |
| 
 | |
| %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 | |
| %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
 | |
| %   @item
 | |
| %   first col stuff
 | |
| %   @tab
 | |
| %   second col stuff
 | |
| %   @tab
 | |
| %   third col
 | |
| %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
 | |
| %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
 | |
| %
 | |
| %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
 | |
| %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
 | |
| %   @end multitable
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
 | |
| % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
 | |
| % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
 | |
| % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
 | |
| % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
 | |
| %                                                            to baseline.
 | |
| %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newskip\multitableparskip
 | |
| \newskip\multitableparindent
 | |
| \newdimen\multitablecolspace
 | |
| \newskip\multitablelinespace
 | |
| \multitableparskip=0pt
 | |
| \multitableparindent=6pt
 | |
| \multitablecolspace=12pt
 | |
| \multitablelinespace=0pt
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
 | |
| %
 | |
| \let\endsetuptable\relax
 | |
| \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
 | |
| \let\columnfractions\relax
 | |
| \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
 | |
| \newif\ifsetpercent
 | |
| 
 | |
| % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
 | |
| % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
 | |
| % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
 | |
| % percent of \hsize for this column.
 | |
| \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
 | |
|   \global\advance\colcount by 1
 | |
|   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
 | |
|   \setuptable
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount\colcount
 | |
| \def\setuptable#1{%
 | |
|   \def\firstarg{#1}%
 | |
|   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
 | |
|     \let\go = \relax
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
 | |
|       \global\setpercenttrue
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \ifsetpercent
 | |
|          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|          \global\advance\colcount by 1
 | |
|          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
 | |
|                             % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
 | |
|          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
 | |
|       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
 | |
|       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
 | |
|       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \let\go = \setuptable
 | |
|     \fi%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \go
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
 | |
| % not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
 | |
| % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
 | |
| % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
 | |
| \def\tab{&}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
 | |
| \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
 | |
|   \vskip\parskip
 | |
|   \let\item\crcr
 | |
|   \tolerance=9500
 | |
|   \hbadness=9500
 | |
|   \setmultitablespacing
 | |
|   \parskip=\multitableparskip
 | |
|   \parindent=\multitableparindent
 | |
|   \overfullrule=0pt
 | |
|   \global\colcount=0
 | |
|   \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
 | |
|   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
 | |
|   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
 | |
|   % The table preamble
 | |
|   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
 | |
|   \everycr{\noalign{%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
 | |
|   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
 | |
|   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
 | |
|   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
 | |
|     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
 | |
|   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
 | |
|   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
 | |
|   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
 | |
|   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
 | |
|     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
 | |
|   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
 | |
|   % the first one.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
 | |
|   % to the width of each template entry.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
 | |
|   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
 | |
|   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
 | |
|   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
 | |
|   \rightskip=0pt
 | |
|   \ifnum\colcount=1
 | |
|     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
 | |
|     \advance\hsize by\leftskip
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \ifsetpercent \else
 | |
|       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
 | |
|       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
 | |
|       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
 | |
|   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
 | |
|   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
 | |
|   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
 | |
|   % For example:
 | |
|   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
 | |
|   % @item @code{#}
 | |
|   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
 | |
|   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
 | |
|   % characters.
 | |
|   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
 | |
| % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
 | |
| % current baselineskip.
 | |
| \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
 | |
| \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 | |
| \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
 | |
| %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
 | |
| %% to keep lines equally spaced
 | |
| \let\multistrut = \strut
 | |
| \else
 | |
| %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
 | |
| \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
 | |
| width0pt\relax} \fi
 | |
| %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
 | |
| %% table. If not, do nothing.
 | |
| %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
 | |
| \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
 | |
| \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
 | |
| \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
 | |
|                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
 | |
| \fi%
 | |
| \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
 | |
| \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
 | |
| \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
 | |
|                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.
 | |
| \fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{conditionals,}
 | |
| % Prevent errors for section commands.
 | |
| % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
 | |
| \def\ignoresections{%
 | |
|   \let\chapter=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumbered=\relax
 | |
|   \let\top=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\section=\relax
 | |
|   \let\subsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\subsubsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\subsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\subsubsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendix=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
 | |
|   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
 | |
|   \let\contents=\relax
 | |
|   \let\smallbook=\relax
 | |
|   \let\titlepage=\relax
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
 | |
| % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
 | |
| % incorrectly.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ignoremorecommands{%
 | |
|   \let\defcodeindex = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defcv = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deffn = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deffnx = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defindex = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defivar = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defmac = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defmethod = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defop = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defopt = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defspec = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftp = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypefn = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypefun = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypeivar = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypeop = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypevar = \relax
 | |
|   \let\deftypevr = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defun = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defvar = \relax
 | |
|   \let\defvr = \relax
 | |
|   \let\ref = \relax
 | |
|   \let\xref = \relax
 | |
|   \let\printindex = \relax
 | |
|   \let\pxref = \relax
 | |
|   \let\settitle = \relax
 | |
|   \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
 | |
|   \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
 | |
|   \let\everyheading = \relax
 | |
|   \let\evenheading = \relax
 | |
|   \let\oddheading = \relax
 | |
|   \let\everyfooting = \relax
 | |
|   \let\evenfooting = \relax
 | |
|   \let\oddfooting = \relax
 | |
|   \let\headings = \relax
 | |
|   \let\include = \relax
 | |
|   \let\lowersections = \relax
 | |
|   \let\down = \relax
 | |
|   \let\raisesections = \relax
 | |
|   \let\up = \relax
 | |
|   \let\set = \relax
 | |
|   \let\clear = \relax
 | |
|   \let\item = \relax
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
 | |
| \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
 | |
| \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
 | |
| \def\html{\doignore{html}}
 | |
| \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
 | |
| \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
 | |
| % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
 | |
| \let\dircategory = \comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
 | |
|   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
 | |
|   \ignoresections
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
 | |
|   % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
 | |
|   % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
 | |
|   \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
 | |
|   \catcode32 = 10
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
 | |
|   \catcode`\{ = 9
 | |
|   \catcode`\} = 9
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
 | |
|   \catcode`\@ = 12
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
 | |
|   % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
 | |
|   %   @c @end ifinfo
 | |
|   % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
 | |
|   % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
 | |
|   \catcode`\c = 14
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % And now expand that command.
 | |
|   \doignoretext
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % What we do to finish off ignored text.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
 | |
| \def\obstexwarn{%
 | |
|   \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
 | |
|   % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
 | |
|   % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
 | |
|     \immediate\write16{}
 | |
|     \global\warnedobstrue
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
 | |
| % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
 | |
| % uncomment the following line:
 | |
| %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
 | |
| % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\nestedignore#1{%
 | |
|   \obstexwarn
 | |
|   % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
 | |
|   % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
 | |
|   % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
 | |
|   % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
 | |
|   % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
 | |
|     % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
 | |
|     \ignoresections
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
 | |
|     % @end command again.
 | |
|     \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
 | |
|     % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
 | |
|     % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
 | |
|     % undefine them.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
 | |
|     % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
 | |
|     \ignoremorecommands
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
 | |
|     % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
 | |
|     % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
 | |
|     % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
 | |
|     % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
 | |
|     % stuff compared to the main input.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \nullfont
 | |
|     \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
 | |
|     \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
 | |
|     \let\tensf=\nullfont
 | |
|     % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
 | |
|     \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
 | |
|     \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
 | |
|     \let\smallsf=\nullfont
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
 | |
|     \tracinglostchars = 0
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
 | |
|     \frenchspacing
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Don't report underfull hboxes.
 | |
|     \hbadness = 10000
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Do minimal line-breaking.
 | |
|     \pretolerance = 10000
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Do not execute instructions in @tex
 | |
|     \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
 | |
|     % Do not execute macro definitions.
 | |
|     % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
 | |
|     \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
 | |
| % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
 | |
| % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
 | |
| % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
 | |
| % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
 | |
| % losing inside @example, for instance.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
 | |
|   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
 | |
|   \parsearg\setxxx}
 | |
| \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
 | |
| \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
 | |
|   \def\temp{#2}%
 | |
|   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
 | |
|   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
 | |
| % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
 | |
| % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
 | |
| \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
 | |
| \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
 | |
| {
 | |
|   \catcode`\_ = \active
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
 | |
|   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
 | |
|   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
 | |
|   \gdef\value{\begingroup
 | |
|     \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
 | |
|     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
 | |
|     \valuexxx}
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
 | |
| % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
 | |
| % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
 | |
| % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
 | |
| % winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
 | |
| % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
 | |
| % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
 | |
| % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\expandablevalue#1{%
 | |
|   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 | |
|     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \csname SET#1\endcsname
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 | |
| % with @set.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
 | |
| \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
 | |
|   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifsetfail
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
 | |
| \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
 | |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
 | |
| % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
 | |
| \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
 | |
|   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifclearfail
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
 | |
| \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
 | |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
 | |
| % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
 | |
| % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
 | |
| \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
 | |
| \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
 | |
| \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
 | |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
 | |
| \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
 | |
| % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
 | |
| % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
 | |
| % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
 | |
| % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
 | |
| % the @ifset might be nested.)
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
 | |
|   \edef\temp{%
 | |
|     % Remember the current value of \E#1.
 | |
|     \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
 | |
|     \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \temp
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
 | |
| % control sequences after we've constructed them.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defininfoenclose.
 | |
| \let\definfoenclose=\comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{indexing,}
 | |
| % Index generation facilities
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
 | |
| % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
 | |
| {\catcode`\@=11
 | |
| \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
 | |
| % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
 | |
| % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
 | |
| % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
 | |
| % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
 | |
| % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
 | |
| % for the sake of vms.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\newindex#1{%
 | |
|   \iflinks
 | |
|     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
 | |
|     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
 | |
|     \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\newcodeindex#1{%
 | |
|   \iflinks
 | |
|     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
 | |
|     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
 | |
|     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
 | |
| % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
 | |
| % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
 | |
| % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
 | |
| \def\synindex#1 #2 {%
 | |
|   \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
 | |
|   \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
 | |
|   \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
 | |
|   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
 | |
|     \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
 | |
| % inside @code.
 | |
| \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
 | |
|   \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
 | |
|   \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
 | |
|   \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
 | |
|   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
 | |
|     \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
 | |
| % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
 | |
| %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
 | |
| % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
 | |
| % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
 | |
| \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
 | |
| \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
 | |
| \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\indexdummies{%
 | |
| \def\ { }%
 | |
| % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
 | |
| \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
 | |
| \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
 | |
| \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
 | |
| \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
 | |
| \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
 | |
| \def\={\realbackslash =}%
 | |
| \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
 | |
| \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
 | |
| \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
 | |
| \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
 | |
| \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
 | |
| \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
 | |
| % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
 | |
| \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
 | |
| \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
 | |
| \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
 | |
| \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
 | |
| \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
 | |
| \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
 | |
| \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
 | |
| \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
 | |
| \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
 | |
| \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
 | |
| \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
 | |
| % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
 | |
| % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
 | |
| % laboriously list every single command here.)
 | |
| \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
 | |
| % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
 | |
| % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
 | |
| % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
 | |
| \let\{ = \mylbrace
 | |
| \let\} = \myrbrace
 | |
| \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
 | |
| \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
 | |
| \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
 | |
| %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
 | |
| \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
 | |
| \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
 | |
| \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
 | |
| \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
 | |
| \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
 | |
| \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
 | |
| \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
 | |
| \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
 | |
| \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
 | |
| \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
 | |
| \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
 | |
| \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
 | |
| \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
 | |
| \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
 | |
| \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
 | |
| \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
 | |
| \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
 | |
| \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
 | |
| % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
 | |
| % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
 | |
| \let\value = \expandablevalue
 | |
| %
 | |
| \unsepspaces
 | |
| % Turn off macro expansion
 | |
| \turnoffmacros
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
 | |
| % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
 | |
| % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
 | |
| {\obeyspaces
 | |
|  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
 | |
| % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
 | |
| \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
 | |
| \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
 | |
| \def\indexdummydots{...}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\indexnofonts{%
 | |
| % Just ignore accents.
 | |
| \let\,=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\"=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\`=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\'=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\^=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\~=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\==\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\b=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\c=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\d=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\u=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\v=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\H=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
 | |
| \def\oe{oe}%
 | |
| \def\ae{ae}%
 | |
| \def\aa{aa}%
 | |
| \def\OE{OE}%
 | |
| \def\AE{AE}%
 | |
| \def\AA{AA}%
 | |
| \def\o{o}%
 | |
| \def\O{O}%
 | |
| \def\l{l}%
 | |
| \def\L{L}%
 | |
| \def\ss{ss}%
 | |
| \let\w=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\t=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\r=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\i=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\b=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
 | |
| % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
 | |
| %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\code=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\url=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\uref=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\env=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\command=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\option=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\file=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\key=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\var=\indexdummyfont
 | |
| \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
 | |
| \let\dots=\indexdummydots
 | |
| \def\@{@}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
 | |
| % We must first make another character (@) an escape
 | |
| % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
 | |
|  @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
 | |
| \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 | |
| 
 | |
| % For \ifx comparisons.
 | |
| \def\emptymacro{\empty}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
 | |
| % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
 | |
| % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
 | |
| % is with defuns, which call us directly.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
 | |
|   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
 | |
|     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     \count255=\lastpenalty
 | |
|     {%
 | |
|       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
 | |
|       \escapechar=`\\
 | |
|       {%
 | |
|         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
 | |
|         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
 | |
|         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         \def\thirdarg{#3}%
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
 | |
|         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
 | |
|           \let\subentry = \empty
 | |
|         \else
 | |
|           \def\subentry{ #3}%
 | |
|         \fi
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
 | |
|         % off to get the string to sort by.
 | |
|         {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
 | |
|         \toks0 = {#2}%
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
 | |
|         % string.  And include a space.
 | |
|         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
 | |
|           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
 | |
|         \fi
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
 | |
|         % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write
 | |
|         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
 | |
|         % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
 | |
|         \edef\temp{%
 | |
|           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
 | |
|             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
 | |
|         }%
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
 | |
|         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
 | |
|         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
 | |
|         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
 | |
|         % like this:
 | |
|         % @end defun
 | |
|         % @tindex whatever
 | |
|         % @defun ...
 | |
|         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
 | |
|         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
 | |
|         % the previous defun.
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
 | |
|         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
 | |
|         %
 | |
|         \iflinks
 | |
|           \ifvmode
 | |
|             \skip0 = \lastskip
 | |
|             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
 | |
|           \fi
 | |
|           %
 | |
|           \temp % do the write
 | |
|           %
 | |
|           %
 | |
|           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
 | |
|         \fi
 | |
|       }%
 | |
|     }%
 | |
|     \penalty\count255
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
 | |
| %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
 | |
| % or
 | |
| %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
 | |
| % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
 | |
| % containing these kinds of lines:
 | |
| %  \initial {c}
 | |
| %     before the first topic whose initial is c
 | |
| %  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
 | |
| %     for a topic that is used without subtopics
 | |
| %  \primary {topic}
 | |
| %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
 | |
| %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
 | |
| %     for each subtopic.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
 | |
| % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\findex {\fnindex}
 | |
| \def\kindex {\kyindex}
 | |
| \def\cindex {\cpindex}
 | |
| \def\vindex {\vrindex}
 | |
| \def\tindex {\tpindex}
 | |
| \def\pindex {\pgindex}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
 | |
| {\obeylines %
 | |
| \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
 | |
| \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
 | |
| % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
 | |
| \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
 | |
|   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \smallfonts \rm
 | |
|   \tolerance = 9500
 | |
|   \indexbreaks
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
 | |
|   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
 | |
|   % \initial {@}
 | |
|   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
 | |
|   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
 | |
|   \catcode`\@ = 11
 | |
|   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
 | |
|   \ifeof 1
 | |
|     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
 | |
|     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
 | |
|     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
 | |
|     % there is some text.
 | |
|     \putwordIndexNonexistent
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
 | |
|     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
 | |
|     % it can discover if there is anything in it.
 | |
|     \read 1 to \temp
 | |
|     \ifeof 1
 | |
|       \putwordIndexIsEmpty
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
 | |
|       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
 | |
|       % to make right now.
 | |
|       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
 | |
|       \catcode`\\ = 0
 | |
|       \escapechar = `\\
 | |
|       \begindoublecolumns
 | |
|       \input \jobname.#1s
 | |
|       \enddoublecolumns
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \closein 1
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
 | |
| % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\initial#1{{%
 | |
|   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
 | |
|   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
 | |
|   \removelastskip
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
 | |
|   \penalty -300
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
 | |
|   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
 | |
|   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
 | |
|   % we need before each entry, but it's better.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
 | |
|   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
 | |
|   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
 | |
|   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
 | |
|   \nobreak
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
 | |
| % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
 | |
| % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
 | |
|   % affect previous text.
 | |
|   \par
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
 | |
|   \parfillskip = 0in
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % No extra space above this paragraph.
 | |
|   \parskip = 0in
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
 | |
|   \finalhyphendemerits = 0
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
 | |
|   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
 | |
|   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
 | |
|   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
 | |
|   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
 | |
|   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
 | |
|   \hangindent = 2em
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
 | |
|   % with blank space.
 | |
|   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
 | |
|   \vskip 0pt plus1pt
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
 | |
|   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
 | |
|   \noindent
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
 | |
|   #1%
 | |
|   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
 | |
|   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
 | |
|   % cursed by a Unix daemon.
 | |
|   \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
 | |
|   \def\tempb{#2}%
 | |
|   \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
 | |
|   \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
 | |
|   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
 | |
|     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
 | |
|     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
 | |
|     \hfil\penalty50
 | |
|     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
 | |
|     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
 | |
|     % \hbox ensues.
 | |
|     \ifpdf
 | |
|       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi%
 | |
|   \par
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
 | |
| \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
 | |
|   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\secondary #1#2{
 | |
| {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
 | |
| \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
 | |
| \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
 | |
| % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
 | |
| % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
 | |
| \catcode`\@=11
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newbox\partialpage
 | |
| \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
 | |
|   % Grab any single-column material above us.
 | |
|   \output = {%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
 | |
|     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
 | |
|     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
 | |
|     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
 | |
|     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
 | |
|     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
 | |
|     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
 | |
|     \ifvoid\partialpage \else
 | |
|       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
 | |
|       % Unvbox the main output page.
 | |
|       \unvbox\PAGE
 | |
|       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
 | |
|     }%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
 | |
|   \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
 | |
|   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
 | |
|   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
 | |
|   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
 | |
|   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
 | |
|   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
 | |
|   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
 | |
|   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
 | |
|   % as it did when we hard-coded it.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
 | |
|   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
 | |
|   % been clobbered.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
 | |
|     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
 | |
|     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
 | |
|   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
 | |
|   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
 | |
|   \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
 | |
|   \vsize = 2\vsize
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
 | |
| % the last.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\doublecolumnout{%
 | |
|   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
 | |
|   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
 | |
|   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
 | |
|   % previous page.
 | |
|   \dimen@ = \vsize
 | |
|   \divide\dimen@ by 2
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
 | |
|   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
 | |
|   \onepageout\pagesofar
 | |
|   \unvbox255
 | |
|   \penalty\outputpenalty
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\pagesofar{%
 | |
|   % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
 | |
|   % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
 | |
|   \unvbox\partialpage
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
 | |
|   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
 | |
|   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\enddoublecolumns{%
 | |
|   \output = {%
 | |
|     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
 | |
|     % current page, no automatic page break.
 | |
|     \balancecolumns
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
 | |
|     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
 | |
|     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
 | |
|     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
 | |
|     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
 | |
|     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
 | |
|     % the output somewhat more palatable.)
 | |
|     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \eject
 | |
|   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
 | |
|   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
 | |
|   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
 | |
|   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
 | |
|   \pagegoal = \vsize
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\balancecolumns{%
 | |
|   % Called at the end of the double column material.
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
 | |
|   \dimen@ = \ht0
 | |
|   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
 | |
|   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
 | |
|   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
 | |
|   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
 | |
|   \splittopskip = \topskip
 | |
|   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     \vbadness = 10000
 | |
|     \loop
 | |
|       \global\setbox3 = \copy0
 | |
|       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
 | |
|     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
 | |
|       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
 | |
|     \repeat
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
 | |
|   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
 | |
|   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \pagesofar
 | |
| }
 | |
| \catcode`\@ = \other
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{sectioning,}
 | |
| % Chapters, sections, etc.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount\chapno
 | |
| \newcount\secno        \secno=0
 | |
| \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
 | |
| \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
 | |
| \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
 | |
| % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
 | |
| % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
 | |
| % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
 | |
| \def\appendixletter{%
 | |
|   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
 | |
|   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
 | |
|   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
 | |
|   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
 | |
|   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
 | |
|   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
 | |
|   \else\char\the\appendixno
 | |
|   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
 | |
|   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
 | |
| % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
 | |
| \def\thischapter{}
 | |
| \def\thissection{}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
 | |
| \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
 | |
| \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
 | |
| \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
 | |
| \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
 | |
| \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Choose a numbered-heading macro
 | |
| % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
 | |
| % #2 is text for heading
 | |
| \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 | |
| \ifcase\absseclevel
 | |
|   \chapterzzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \seczzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 | |
|     \chapterzzz{#2}
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
 | |
| \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 | |
| \ifcase\absseclevel
 | |
|   \appendixzzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 | |
|     \appendixzzz{#2}
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
 | |
| \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
 | |
| \ifcase\absseclevel
 | |
|   \unnumberedzzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \or
 | |
|   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \ifnum \absseclevel<0
 | |
|     \unnumberedzzz{#2}
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
 | |
| \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
 | |
| \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
 | |
| \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
 | |
| \def\chapterzzz #1{%
 | |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 | |
| \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
 | |
| \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
 | |
| % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
 | |
| % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
 | |
| \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                                   {\the\chapno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \donoderef
 | |
| \global\let\section = \numberedsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
 | |
| \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
 | |
| \def\appendixzzz #1{%
 | |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 | |
| \global\advance \appendixno by 1
 | |
| \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
 | |
| \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
 | |
| \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                        {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \appendixnoderef
 | |
| \global\let\section = \appendixsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
 | |
| \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
 | |
| \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @top is like @unnumbered.
 | |
| \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
 | |
| \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
 | |
| \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
 | |
| \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
 | |
| % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
 | |
| % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
 | |
| % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
 | |
| % to be executed, not expanded).
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
 | |
| % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
 | |
| % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
 | |
| % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
 | |
| % the toc entries.)
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
 | |
| %
 | |
| \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
 | |
| \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \unnumbnoderef
 | |
| \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Sections.
 | |
| \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
 | |
| \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
 | |
| \def\seczzz #1{%
 | |
| \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                                   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \donoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
 | |
| \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
 | |
| \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
 | |
| \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                                   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \appendixnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
 | |
| \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \unnumbnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsections.
 | |
| \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
 | |
| \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                                     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \donoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
 | |
| \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|                                 {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \appendixnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
 | |
|                                     {\the\toks0}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \unnumbnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsubsections.
 | |
| \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
 | |
| \subsubsecheading {#1}
 | |
|   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|   {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \donoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
 | |
| \subsubsecheading {#1}
 | |
|   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|   {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \appendixnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
 | |
| \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
 | |
| \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
 | |
| \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
 | |
| \toks0 = {#1}%
 | |
| \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
 | |
|                                     {\the\toks0}}}%
 | |
| \temp
 | |
| \unnumbnoderef
 | |
| \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
 | |
| % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
 | |
| \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
 | |
| \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
 | |
| \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
 | |
| \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
 | |
| \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
 | |
| \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
 | |
| \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
 | |
| \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
 | |
| \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
 | |
| \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
 | |
| \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These macros control what the section commands do, according
 | |
| % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
 | |
| % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
 | |
| \global\let\section = \numberedsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
 | |
| \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 | |
| 
 | |
| % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
 | |
| %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
 | |
| %          overlong headings to fold.
 | |
| %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
 | |
| %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
 | |
| %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
 | |
| %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
 | |
| \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
 | |
| {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
 | |
| {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 | |
|                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 | |
|                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
 | |
| \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
 | |
| {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 | |
|                   \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 | |
|                   \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
 | |
| \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
 | |
| \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
 | |
| \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
 | |
| % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
 | |
| % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
 | |
| 
 | |
| %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 | |
| \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 | |
| % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newskip\chapheadingskip
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
 | |
| \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
 | |
| \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 | |
| \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
 | |
| \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\CHAPPAGon{%
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
 | |
| \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
 | |
| \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
 | |
| \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\CHAPPAGodd{
 | |
| \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 | |
| \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
 | |
| \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
 | |
| \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \CHAPPAGon
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\CHAPFplain{
 | |
| \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
 | |
| \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
 | |
| \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Plain chapter opening.
 | |
| % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
 | |
| \def\chfplain#1#2{%
 | |
|   \pchapsepmacro
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     \chapfonts \rm
 | |
|     \def\chapnum{#2}%
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
 | |
|     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
 | |
|           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
 | |
|           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
 | |
|   \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Plain opening for unnumbered.
 | |
| \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
 | |
| \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
 | |
| \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
 | |
|   \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
 | |
|     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
 | |
|     \leftskip = \rightskip
 | |
|     \parfillskip = 0pt
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \chfplain{#1}{}%
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \CHAPFplain % The default
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\unnchfopen #1{%
 | |
| \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 | |
|                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright
 | |
|                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 | |
| \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 | |
| \par\penalty 5000 %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\centerchfopen #1{%
 | |
| \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
 | |
|                        \parindent=0pt
 | |
|                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\CHAPFopen{
 | |
| \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
 | |
| \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
 | |
| \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Section titles.
 | |
| \newskip\secheadingskip
 | |
| \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
 | |
| \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
 | |
| \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsection titles.
 | |
| \newskip \subsecheadingskip
 | |
| \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
 | |
| \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
 | |
| \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsubsection titles.
 | |
| \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
 | |
| \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
 | |
| \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
 | |
| \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Print any size section title.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
 | |
| % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
 | |
| \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
 | |
|     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
 | |
|     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
 | |
|     \def\secnum{#2}%
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
 | |
|           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
 | |
|           \unhbox0 #3}%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{toc,}
 | |
| % Table of contents.
 | |
| \newwrite\tocfile
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
 | |
| % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
 | |
| % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
 | |
| % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newif\iftocfileopened
 | |
| \def\writetocentry#1{%
 | |
|   \iftocfileopened\else
 | |
|     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
 | |
|     \global\tocfileopenedtrue
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
 | |
| \newcount\savepageno
 | |
| \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
 | |
| % to \tocfile.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\startcontents#1{%
 | |
|    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
 | |
|    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
 | |
|    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
 | |
|    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
 | |
|    \contentsalignmacro
 | |
|    \immediate\closeout\tocfile
 | |
|    %
 | |
|    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
 | |
|    % It is abundantly clear what they are.
 | |
|    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
 | |
|    \savepageno = \pageno
 | |
|    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
 | |
|       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
 | |
|       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
 | |
|       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
 | |
|       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
 | |
|       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
 | |
|       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       % Roman numerals for page numbers.
 | |
|       \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Normal (long) toc.
 | |
| \def\contents{%
 | |
|    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
 | |
|      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
 | |
|      \ifeof 1 \else
 | |
|        \closein 1
 | |
|        \input \jobname.toc
 | |
|      \fi
 | |
|      \vfill \eject
 | |
|      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
 | |
|      \pdfmakeoutlines
 | |
|    \endgroup
 | |
|    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
 | |
|    \pageno = \savepageno
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % And just the chapters.
 | |
| \def\summarycontents{%
 | |
|    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
 | |
|       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
 | |
|       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
 | |
|       \secfonts
 | |
|       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
 | |
|       \rm
 | |
|       \hyphenpenalty = 10000
 | |
|       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
 | |
|       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
 | |
|       \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
 | |
|       \openin 1 \jobname.toc
 | |
|       \ifeof 1 \else
 | |
|         \closein 1
 | |
|         \input \jobname.toc
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|      \vfill \eject
 | |
|      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
 | |
|    \endgroup
 | |
|    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
 | |
|    \pageno = \savepageno
 | |
| }
 | |
| \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
 | |
| 
 | |
| \ifpdf
 | |
|   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
 | |
| % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
 | |
| % The last argument is the page number.
 | |
| % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
 | |
| \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
 | |
| \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
 | |
| % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
 | |
| % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
 | |
| % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
 | |
| % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newdimen\shortappendixwidth
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
 | |
|   % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}%
 | |
|   \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
 | |
|   % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
 | |
|   \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
 | |
|   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
 | |
|   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
 | |
|   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
 | |
|   \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
 | |
|   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
 | |
| \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Sections.
 | |
| \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
 | |
| \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Subsections.
 | |
| \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
 | |
| \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % And subsubsections.
 | |
| \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 | |
|   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
 | |
| \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
 | |
| \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
 | |
| % page number.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
 | |
| % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
 | |
| \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
 | |
|    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
 | |
|    \begingroup
 | |
|      \chapentryfonts
 | |
|      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 | |
|    \endgroup
 | |
|    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 | |
|   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
 | |
|   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 | |
|   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
 | |
|   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
 | |
|   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
 | |
|   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
 | |
| % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
 | |
| % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
 | |
| % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
 | |
| \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
 | |
|   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
 | |
|   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
 | |
|   % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
 | |
|   % have to do the usual translation tricks.
 | |
|   \entry{#1}{#2}%
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
 | |
| \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
 | |
| \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
 | |
| \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
 | |
| \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
 | |
| \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{environments,}
 | |
| % @foo ... @end foo.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
 | |
| % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
 | |
| % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
 | |
| \newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
 | |
| \newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
 | |
| \newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
 | |
| 
 | |
| %{\tentt
 | |
| %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
 | |
| %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
 | |
| %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
 | |
| %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
 | |
| % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
 | |
| %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
 | |
| %                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
 | |
| %}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
 | |
| \def\point{$\star$}
 | |
| \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
 | |
| \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
 | |
| \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
 | |
| \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
 | |
| {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
 | |
| \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
 | |
| % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
 | |
| \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
 | |
|    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
 | |
|    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
 | |
|    \vbox{
 | |
|       \hrule height\dimen2
 | |
|       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
 | |
|          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
 | |
|          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
 | |
|       \hrule height\dimen2}
 | |
|     \hfil}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The @error{} command.
 | |
| \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
 | |
| % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
 | |
| % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\tex{\begingroup
 | |
|   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
 | |
|   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
 | |
|   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
 | |
|   \catcode `\%=14
 | |
|   \catcode 43=12 % plus
 | |
|   \catcode`\"=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\==12
 | |
|   \catcode`\|=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\<=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\>=12
 | |
|   \escapechar=`\\
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \let\b=\ptexb
 | |
|   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
 | |
|   \let\c=\ptexc
 | |
|   \let\,=\ptexcomma
 | |
|   \let\.=\ptexdot
 | |
|   \let\dots=\ptexdots
 | |
|   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
 | |
|   \let\!=\ptexexclam
 | |
|   \let\i=\ptexi
 | |
|   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
 | |
|   \let\+=\tabalign
 | |
|   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
 | |
|   \let\*=\ptexstar
 | |
|   \let\t=\ptext
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
 | |
|   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
 | |
|   \def\@{@}%
 | |
| \let\Etex=\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
 | |
| % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
 | |
| % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
 | |
| \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
 | |
| % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
 | |
| % have any width.
 | |
| \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
 | |
| % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
 | |
| % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
 | |
| % should produce a line of output anyway.
 | |
| %
 | |
| {\obeyspaces %
 | |
| \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
 | |
| % for use in \parsearg.
 | |
| {\sepspaces%
 | |
| \global\let\obeyedspace= }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This space is always present above and below environments.
 | |
| \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
 | |
| % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
 | |
| % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
 | |
| % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
 | |
| \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
 | |
| \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
 | |
| \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
 | |
| % environment contents.
 | |
| \font\circle=lcircle10
 | |
| \newdimen\circthick
 | |
| \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
 | |
| \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
 | |
| \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
 | |
| \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
 | |
| \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
 | |
| \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
 | |
| \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
 | |
|         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
 | |
|         \hskip\rskip}}
 | |
| \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
 | |
|         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
 | |
|         \hskip\rskip}}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
 | |
| 
 | |
| \long\def\cartouche{%
 | |
| \begingroup
 | |
|         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
 | |
|         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
 | |
|         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
 | |
|                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
 | |
|         \cartouter=\hsize
 | |
|         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
 | |
| %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
 | |
| %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
 | |
|         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
 | |
|         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
 | |
|         \let\nonarrowing=\comment
 | |
|         \vbox\bgroup
 | |
|                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
 | |
|                 \carttop
 | |
|                 \hbox\bgroup
 | |
|                         \hskip\lskip
 | |
|                         \vrule\kern3pt
 | |
|                         \vbox\bgroup
 | |
|                                 \hsize=\cartinner
 | |
|                                 \kern3pt
 | |
|                                 \begingroup
 | |
|                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip
 | |
|                                         \lineskip=\normlskip
 | |
|                                         \parskip=\normpskip
 | |
|                                         \vskip -\parskip
 | |
| \def\Ecartouche{%
 | |
|                                 \endgroup
 | |
|                                 \kern3pt
 | |
|                         \egroup
 | |
|                         \kern3pt\vrule
 | |
|                         \hskip\rskip
 | |
|                 \egroup
 | |
|                 \cartbot
 | |
|         \egroup
 | |
| \endgroup
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
 | |
| % inside a group.
 | |
| \def\nonfillstart{%
 | |
|   \aboveenvbreak
 | |
|   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
 | |
|   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
 | |
|   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
 | |
|   \singlespace
 | |
|   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
 | |
|   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
 | |
|   \parskip = 0pt
 | |
|   \parindent = 0pt
 | |
|   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
 | |
|   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
 | |
|   % at next level down.
 | |
|   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
 | |
|     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
 | |
|     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
 | |
|     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
 | |
|     \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
 | |
| % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
 | |
| % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
 | |
| % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
 | |
| % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
 | |
| % the environment.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
 | |
| \def\lisp{\begingroup
 | |
|   \nonfillstart
 | |
|   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
 | |
|   \tt
 | |
|   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
 | |
|   \gobble       % eat return
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @example: Same as @lisp.
 | |
| \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
 | |
| % redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
 | |
| % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
 | |
| % whatever) command.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
 | |
| % @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
 | |
| \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 | |
| \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
 | |
| \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
 | |
| % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
 | |
| \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
 | |
|   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 | |
|   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 | |
|   \smallfonts
 | |
|   \lisp
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\display{\begingroup
 | |
|   \nonfillstart
 | |
|   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
 | |
|   \gobble
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
 | |
|   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 | |
|   \smallfonts \rm
 | |
|   \display
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\format{\begingroup
 | |
|   \let\nonarrowing = t
 | |
|   \nonfillstart
 | |
|   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
 | |
|   \gobble
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
 | |
|   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
 | |
|   \smallfonts \rm
 | |
|   \format
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @flushleft (same as @format).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @flushright.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\flushright{\begingroup
 | |
|   \let\nonarrowing = t
 | |
|   \nonfillstart
 | |
|   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
 | |
|   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
 | |
|   \gobble
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
 | |
| % and narrows the margins.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\quotation{%
 | |
|   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
 | |
|   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
 | |
|   \singlespace
 | |
|   \parindent=0pt
 | |
|   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
 | |
|   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
 | |
|   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
 | |
|   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
 | |
|     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
 | |
|     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
 | |
|     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
 | |
|     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{defuns,}
 | |
| % @defun etc.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
 | |
| \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
 | |
| \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
 | |
| \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
 | |
| \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount\parencount
 | |
| % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
 | |
| % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
 | |
| \def\activeparens{%
 | |
| \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
 | |
| \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
 | |
| \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
 | |
| % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
 | |
| % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
 | |
| \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
 | |
| \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
 | |
| \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
 | |
| % This is used to turn on special parens
 | |
| % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
 | |
| \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
 | |
| % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
 | |
| \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
 | |
|   \global\advance\parencount by 1
 | |
| }
 | |
| %
 | |
| % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
 | |
| \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
 | |
| %
 | |
| \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
 | |
|   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
 | |
|   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
 | |
|   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
 | |
| % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
 | |
| \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
 | |
| %
 | |
| \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
 | |
| } % End of definition inside \activeparens
 | |
| %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
 | |
| %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
 | |
| \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
 | |
| \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
 | |
| \let\ampnr = \&
 | |
| \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
 | |
| \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
 | |
| {
 | |
|   \catcode`& = 13
 | |
|   \global\let& = \ampnr
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
 | |
| % #1 should be the function name.
 | |
| % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defname #1#2{%
 | |
| % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
 | |
| % outside the @def...
 | |
| \dimen2=\leftskip
 | |
| \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
 | |
| \noindent
 | |
| \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
 | |
| \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
 | |
| \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
 | |
| \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
 | |
| % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
 | |
| % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
 | |
| % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
 | |
| {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
 | |
| % so that \rightline will obey them.
 | |
| \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
 | |
| \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
 | |
| % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
 | |
| \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| {\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Actually process the body of a definition
 | |
| % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
 | |
| % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
 | |
| % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
 | |
| %    such as \defunheader.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
 | |
| \medbreak %
 | |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
| % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
| \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
 | |
| \parindent=0in
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| \begingroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
 | |
| \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
 | |
| % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
 | |
| % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
 | |
| % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
 | |
| \medbreak %
 | |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
| % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
| \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
 | |
| \parindent=0in
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
 | |
| % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
 | |
| % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
 | |
| % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
 | |
| % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
 | |
| % #5 is the method's return type.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
 | |
|   \medbreak
 | |
|   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
|   \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
 | |
|   \parindent=0in
 | |
|   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
|   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
|   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
 | |
| % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
 | |
| % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
 | |
| % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
 | |
| % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
 | |
| % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
 | |
| % 
 | |
| \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
 | |
|   \medbreak
 | |
|   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
|   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
 | |
|     \def#4{##1}%
 | |
|     \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
 | |
|   \parindent=0in
 | |
|   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
|   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
|   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
 | |
| \medbreak %
 | |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
| % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
| \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
 | |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
 | |
| \parindent=0in
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
 | |
| % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
 | |
| % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
 | |
| \medbreak %
 | |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
| % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
| \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
 | |
| \parindent=0in
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| \begingroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\active %
 | |
| \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
 | |
| % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   \begingroup\inENV %
 | |
|   \medbreak %
 | |
|   % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
|   % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
|   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
|   \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
 | |
|   \parindent=0in
 | |
|   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
|   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
|   \begingroup\obeylines
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
 | |
|   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
 | |
|   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
 | |
| % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
 | |
| % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
 | |
| % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
 | |
| %
 | |
| % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
 | |
| % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
 | |
| % won't strip off the braces.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
 | |
|   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
 | |
|   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
 | |
| % braces (if any).  That's what this does.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
 | |
| % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
 | |
| % (which might be empty) the arguments.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
 | |
| }%
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
 | |
| \medbreak %
 | |
| % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
 | |
| % so that it will exit this group.
 | |
| \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
 | |
| \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
 | |
| \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
 | |
| \parindent=0in
 | |
| \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
 | |
| \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
 | |
| \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Split up #2 at the first space token.
 | |
| % call #1 with two arguments:
 | |
| %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
 | |
| %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
 | |
| % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
 | |
| % and the second is passed as empty.
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\obeylines
 | |
| \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
 | |
| \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
 | |
| \ifx\relax #3%
 | |
| #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define @defun.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
 | |
| % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
 | |
| % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
 | |
| % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
 | |
| % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
 | |
| {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
 | |
| #1%
 | |
| {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
 | |
| \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
 | |
| \interlinepenalty=10000
 | |
| \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
 | |
| \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
 | |
| % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
 | |
| % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
 | |
| % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
 | |
| \boldbraxnoamp
 | |
| \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
 | |
| \interlinepenalty=10000
 | |
| \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
 | |
| \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defun == @deffn Function
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
 | |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
 | |
| \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
 | |
| % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
 | |
| \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
 | |
| \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
 | |
| \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
 | |
| % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
 | |
| \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
 | |
| \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
 | |
| % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
 | |
| \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
 | |
| \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup
 | |
| \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
 | |
| %               at least some C++ text from working
 | |
| \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
 | |
| \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defmac == @deffn Macro
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
 | |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
 | |
| \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
 | |
| \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
 | |
| \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
 | |
| \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
 | |
| \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
 | |
|   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
 | |
|                        \deftypeopcategory}
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
 | |
| \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
 | |
|   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
 | |
|             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
 | |
|     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\deftypemethod{%
 | |
|   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
 | |
| \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
 | |
|   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
 | |
|     \deftypefunargs{#4}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\deftypeivar{%
 | |
|   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
 | |
| \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
 | |
|     \defvarargs{#3}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defmethod == @defop Method
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
 | |
| \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
 | |
|     \defunargs{#3}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
 | |
| \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
 | |
| \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
 | |
| \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
 | |
|   \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
 | |
|   \begingroup
 | |
|     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
 | |
|     \defvarargs{#3}%
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defvar
 | |
| % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
 | |
| % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
 | |
| % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
 | |
| \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
 | |
| \interlinepenalty=10000
 | |
| \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defvr Counter foo-count
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defvar == @defvr Variable
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
 | |
| \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
 | |
| \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypevar int foobar
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
 | |
| % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
 | |
| \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
 | |
| \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
 | |
| \interlinepenalty=10000
 | |
| \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
 | |
| \interlinepenalty=10000
 | |
| \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Now define @deftp
 | |
| % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @deftp Class window height width ...
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
 | |
| \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
 | |
| % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
 | |
| % 
 | |
| \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
 | |
| \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{macros,}
 | |
| % @macro.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 | |
| % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
 | |
| \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
 | |
|  \newwrite\macscribble
 | |
|  \def\scanmacro#1{%
 | |
|    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
 | |
|    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
 | |
|    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
 | |
|    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
 | |
|    \toks0={#1\endinput}%
 | |
|    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
 | |
|    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
 | |
|    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
 | |
|    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
 | |
|    \input \jobname.tmp
 | |
|    \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| \else
 | |
| \def\scanmacro#1{%
 | |
| \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
 | |
| % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
 | |
| \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
 | |
| \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
 | |
| \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
 | |
| \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
 | |
| \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
 | |
|                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Utility routines.
 | |
| % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
 | |
| \def\cslet#1#2{%
 | |
| \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
| \expandafter\let
 | |
| \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
| \csname#1\endcsname
 | |
| \csname#2\endcsname}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
 | |
| % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
 | |
| {\catcode`\@=11
 | |
| \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
 | |
| \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
 | |
| \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
 | |
| \def\unbrace#1{#1}
 | |
| \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
 | |
| {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
 | |
| \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
 | |
| \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
 | |
| \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
 | |
| % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
 | |
| % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
 | |
| % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 | |
| % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\macrobodyctxt{%
 | |
|   \catcode`\~=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\^=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\_=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\|=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\<=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\>=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\+=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\{=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\}=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\@=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^M=12
 | |
|   \usembodybackslash}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\macroargctxt{%
 | |
|   \catcode`\~=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\^=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\_=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\|=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\<=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\>=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\+=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\@=12
 | |
|   \catcode`\\=12}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 | |
| % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
 | |
| % where N is the macro parameter number.
 | |
| % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
 | |
| % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
 | |
|  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
 | |
|  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
 | |
| }
 | |
| \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
 | |
| \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\macroxxx#1{%
 | |
|   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
 | |
|   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
 | |
|      \paramno=0%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
 | |
|      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
 | |
|      \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
 | |
|      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
 | |
|      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
 | |
|      % Add the macroname to \macrolist
 | |
|      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
 | |
|      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
 | |
|        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
 | |
|   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
 | |
|   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
 | |
|   \fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
 | |
| \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
 | |
|   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
 | |
|     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
 | |
|     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
 | |
|     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
 | |
|     \begingroup
 | |
|       \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
 | |
|       \def\do##1{%
 | |
|         \def\tempb{##1}%
 | |
|         \ifx\tempa\tempb
 | |
|           % remove this
 | |
|         \else
 | |
|           \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
 | |
|           \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
 | |
|         \fi}%
 | |
|       \def\newmacrolist{}%
 | |
|       % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
 | |
|       \macrolist
 | |
|       \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
 | |
|     \endgroup
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
 | |
| % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
 | |
| % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
 | |
| \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
 | |
| \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
 | |
| \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
 | |
| \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
 | |
| % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
 | |
| % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
 | |
| % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
 | |
| % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
 | |
| % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
 | |
| % it to # just before using the token list produced.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
 | |
| % the macro is used.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
 | |
|         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
 | |
| \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
 | |
|   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
 | |
|   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
 | |
|     \advance\paramno by 1%
 | |
|     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
 | |
|         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
 | |
|     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
 | |
|   \fi\next}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
 | |
| % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
 | |
| 
 | |
| \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
 | |
| {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
 | |
| \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
 | |
| {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
 | |
| % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
 | |
| % Much magic with \expandafter here.
 | |
| % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
 | |
| % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
 | |
| \def\defmacro{%
 | |
|   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
 | |
|   \ifrecursive
 | |
|     \ifcase\paramno
 | |
|     % 0
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 | |
|     \or % 1
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 | |
|          \noexpand\braceorline
 | |
|          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
 | |
|          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 | |
|     \else % many
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 | |
|          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
 | |
|           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef
 | |
|       \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
|         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
 | |
|           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \ifcase\paramno
 | |
|     % 0
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 | |
|         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 | |
|     \or % 1
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 | |
|          \noexpand\braceorline
 | |
|          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
 | |
|         \egroup
 | |
|         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 | |
|         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 | |
|     \else % many
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
 | |
|          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
 | |
|          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
 | |
|           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
 | |
|       \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
|       \expandafter\xdef
 | |
|       \expandafter\expandafter
 | |
|       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
 | |
|       \paramlist{%
 | |
|           \egroup
 | |
|           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
 | |
|           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
 | |
| % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
 | |
| % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
 | |
| % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
 | |
| \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
 | |
| \def\braceorlinexxx{%
 | |
|   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
 | |
|     \expandafter\parsearg
 | |
|   \fi \next}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
 | |
| % expanded by \write.
 | |
| \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
 | |
|   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @alias.
 | |
| % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
 | |
| % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
 | |
| \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
 | |
| \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
 | |
| \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
 | |
| \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
 | |
|            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
 | |
| \expandafter\endgroup\next}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{cross references,}
 | |
| % @xref etc.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newwrite\auxfile
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
 | |
| \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @inforef is relatively simple.
 | |
| \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
 | |
| \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
 | |
|   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
 | |
| \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
 | |
| \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
 | |
| \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
 | |
| \let\nwnode=\node
 | |
| \let\lastnode=\relax
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
 | |
| \def\donoderef{%
 | |
|   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 | |
|     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
 | |
|       {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
 | |
|     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\unnumbnoderef{%
 | |
|   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 | |
|     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
 | |
|     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\appendixnoderef{%
 | |
|   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
 | |
|     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
 | |
|       {Yappendixletterandtype}%
 | |
|     \global\let\lastnode=\relax
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newcount\savesfregister
 | |
| \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
 | |
| \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
 | |
| \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
 | |
| % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
 | |
| % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
 | |
| % aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
 | |
| % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\setref#1#2{{%
 | |
|   \indexdummies
 | |
|   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
 | |
|   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
 | |
|   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
 | |
|   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 | |
| % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
 | |
| % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
 | |
| % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 | |
| \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 | |
| \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 | |
| \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
 | |
|   \unsepspaces
 | |
|   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
 | |
|   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
 | |
|   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
 | |
|   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
 | |
|   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
 | |
|     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
 | |
|     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
 | |
|       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
 | |
|       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
 | |
|       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
 | |
|       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
 | |
|         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
 | |
|         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|         \ifhavexrefs
 | |
|           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
 | |
|           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
 | |
|         \else
 | |
|           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
 | |
|           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
 | |
|         \fi%
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
 | |
|   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
 | |
|   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
 | |
|   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
 | |
|   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
 | |
|   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
 | |
|   \ifpdf
 | |
|     \leavevmode
 | |
|     \getfilename{#4}%
 | |
|     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
 | |
|       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 | |
|         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
 | |
|     \else
 | |
|       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
 | |
|         goto name{#1@}%
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|     \linkcolor
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
 | |
|     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
 | |
|     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
 | |
|     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
 | |
|     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
 | |
|     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
 | |
|     {\normalturnoffactive
 | |
|      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
 | |
|      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
 | |
|      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
 | |
|      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
 | |
|     }%
 | |
|     % [mynode],
 | |
|     [\printednodename],\space
 | |
|     % page 3
 | |
|     \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \endlink
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
 | |
| % and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
 | |
| \def\dosetq#1#2{%
 | |
|   {\let\folio=0%
 | |
|    \normalturnoffactive
 | |
|    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
 | |
|    \iflinks
 | |
|      \next
 | |
|    \fi
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
 | |
| % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
 | |
| % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Ynothing{}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
 | |
| \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
 | |
| \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
 | |
| \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
 | |
| \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
 | |
| \else %
 | |
| \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
 | |
| \fi \fi \fi }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
 | |
| \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
 | |
| \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
 | |
| \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
 | |
| \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
 | |
| \else %
 | |
| \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
 | |
| \fi \fi \fi }
 | |
| 
 | |
| \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
 | |
| % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
 | |
|   \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
 | |
| \else
 | |
|   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
 | |
| % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \def\refx#1#2{%
 | |
|   \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
 | |
|     % If not defined, say something at least.
 | |
|     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
 | |
|     \iflinks
 | |
|       \ifhavexrefs
 | |
|         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
 | |
|           \global\warnedxrefstrue
 | |
|           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
 | |
|         \fi
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % It's defined, so just use it.
 | |
|     \csname X#1\endcsname
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
 | |
|   % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
 | |
|   \catcode`\\ = 0
 | |
|   \afterassignment\endgroup
 | |
|   \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
 | |
| \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^@=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^A=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^B=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^C=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^D=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^E=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^F=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^G=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^H=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^K=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^L=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^N=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^P=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^Q=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^R=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^S=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^T=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^U=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^V=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^W=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^X=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^Z=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^[=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^\=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^]=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^^=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^^_=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\@=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\^=\other
 | |
|   % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
 | |
|   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
 | |
|   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
 | |
|   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
 | |
|   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
 | |
|   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
 | |
|   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
 | |
|   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
 | |
|   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
 | |
|   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \catcode`\~=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\[=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\]=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\"=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\_=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\|=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\<=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\>=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\$=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\#=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\&=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
 | |
|   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
 | |
|   {%
 | |
|     \count 1=128
 | |
|     \def\loop{%
 | |
|       \catcode\count 1=\other
 | |
|       \advance\count 1 by 1
 | |
|       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
 | |
|     }%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
|   % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
 | |
|   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
 | |
|   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
 | |
|   % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
 | |
|   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
 | |
|   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
 | |
|   \catcode`\{=1
 | |
|   \catcode`\}=2
 | |
|   \catcode`\%=\other
 | |
|   \catcode`\'=0
 | |
|   \catcode`\\=\other
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \openin 1 \jobname.aux
 | |
|   \ifeof 1 \else
 | |
|     \closein 1
 | |
|     \input \jobname.aux
 | |
|     \global\havexrefstrue
 | |
|     \global\warnedobstrue
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
 | |
|   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
 | |
| \endgroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Footnotes.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \newcount \footnoteno
 | |
| 
 | |
| % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
 | |
| % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
 | |
| % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
 | |
| % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
 | |
| % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
 | |
| \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
 | |
| \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
 | |
| 
 | |
| {\catcode `\@=11
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 | |
| \gdef\footnote{%
 | |
|   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
 | |
|   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
 | |
|   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
 | |
|   \let\@sf\empty
 | |
|   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
 | |
|   \unskip
 | |
|   \thisfootno\@sf
 | |
|   \footnotezzz
 | |
| }%
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
 | |
| % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
 | |
| % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
 | |
| % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
 | |
|   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
 | |
|   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
 | |
|   % So reset some parameters.
 | |
|   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
 | |
|   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
 | |
|   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
 | |
|   \floatingpenalty\@MM
 | |
|   \leftskip\z@skip
 | |
|   \rightskip\z@skip
 | |
|   \spaceskip\z@skip
 | |
|   \xspaceskip\z@skip
 | |
|   \parindent\defaultparindent
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \smallfonts \rm
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Hang the footnote text off the number.
 | |
|   \hang
 | |
|   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
 | |
|   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
 | |
|   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
 | |
|   \footstrut
 | |
|   \futurelet\next\fo@t
 | |
| }
 | |
| \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
 | |
|   \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
 | |
| \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
 | |
| \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
 | |
| \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
 | |
| 
 | |
| }%end \catcode `\@=11
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
 | |
| % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
 | |
| % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
 | |
| \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
 | |
| \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\setleading#1{%
 | |
|   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
 | |
|   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
 | |
|   \normalbaselines
 | |
|   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
 | |
|     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
 | |
|                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
 | |
| % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
 | |
| % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
 | |
| % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
 | |
| % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\|{%
 | |
|   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
 | |
|   \leavevmode
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
 | |
|   \vadjust{%
 | |
|     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
 | |
|     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
 | |
|     \vskip-\baselineskip
 | |
|     %
 | |
|     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
 | |
|     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
 | |
|     \llap{%
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
 | |
|       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
 | |
|       %
 | |
|       % This is the space between the bar and the text.
 | |
|       \hskip 12pt
 | |
|     }%
 | |
|   }%
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
 | |
| % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
 | |
| % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
 | |
| % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
 | |
| % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
 | |
| % undone and the next image would fail.
 | |
| \openin 1 = epsf.tex
 | |
| \ifeof 1 \else
 | |
|   \closein 1
 | |
|   % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
 | |
|   % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
 | |
|   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
 | |
|   \input epsf.tex
 | |
| \fi
 | |
| %
 | |
| % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
 | |
| \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
 | |
| \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
 | |
|   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
 | |
|   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\image#1{%
 | |
|   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
 | |
|     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
 | |
|       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
 | |
|       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
 | |
|       \global\warnednoepsftrue
 | |
|     \fi
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| %
 | |
| % Arguments to @image:
 | |
| % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
 | |
| % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
 | |
| % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
 | |
| \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
 | |
|   \ifpdf
 | |
|     \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
 | |
|     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
 | |
|     \begingroup
 | |
|       \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
 | |
|       % If the image is by itself, center it.
 | |
|       \ifvmode
 | |
|         \nobreak\bigskip
 | |
|         % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
 | |
|         % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
 | |
|         % above and below. 
 | |
|         \nobreak\vskip\parskip
 | |
|         \nobreak
 | |
|         \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
 | |
|         \bigbreak
 | |
|       \else
 | |
|         % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
 | |
|         \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
 | |
|       \fi
 | |
|     \endgroup
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{localization,}
 | |
| % and i18n.
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
 | |
| % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
 | |
| % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
 | |
| % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
 | |
| \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
 | |
|   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
 | |
|   % Read the file if it exists.
 | |
|   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
 | |
|   \ifeof1
 | |
|     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
 | |
|     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
 | |
|     \let\temp = \relax
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
|   \temp
 | |
|   \endgroup
 | |
| }
 | |
| \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
 | |
| is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
 | |
| should work if nowhere else does.}
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
 | |
| % likely, but for now just recognize it.
 | |
| \let\documentencoding = \comment
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Page size parameters.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
 | |
| 
 | |
| \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
 | |
| \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
 | |
| \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
 | |
| \vbadness = 10000
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
 | |
| \hbadness = 2000
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
 | |
| \widowpenalty=10000
 | |
| \clubpenalty=10000
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
 | |
| % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
 | |
| % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
 | |
| % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\setemergencystretch{%
 | |
|   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
 | |
|     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
 | |
|     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
 | |
|   \else
 | |
|     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
 | |
|   \fi
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
 | |
| % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
 | |
| % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
 | |
|   \voffset = #3\relax
 | |
|   \topskip = #6\relax
 | |
|   \splittopskip = \topskip
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \vsize = #1\relax
 | |
|   \advance\vsize by \topskip
 | |
|   \outervsize = \vsize
 | |
|   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
 | |
|   \pageheight = \vsize
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \hsize = #2\relax
 | |
|   \outerhsize = \hsize
 | |
|   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
 | |
|   \pagewidth = \hsize
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \normaloffset = #4\relax
 | |
|   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \parindent = \defaultparindent
 | |
|   \setemergencystretch
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @letterpaper (the default).
 | |
| \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
 | |
|   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 | |
|   \setleading{13.2pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
 | |
| \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
 | |
|   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
 | |
|   \setleading{12pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
 | |
|   \tolerance = 700
 | |
|   \hfuzz = 1pt
 | |
|   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
 | |
|   \deftypemargin = 0pt
 | |
|   \defbodyindent = .5cm
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
 | |
|   \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
 | |
|   \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
 | |
|   \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
 | |
| \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
 | |
|   \setleading{12pt}%
 | |
|   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \tolerance = 700
 | |
|   \hfuzz = 1pt
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
 | |
| % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
 | |
| \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
 | |
|   \setleading{13.6pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \afourpaper
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \globaldefs = 0
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
 | |
| \def\afourwide{%
 | |
|   \afourpaper
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \globaldefs = 0
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
 | |
| % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
 | |
| % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
 | |
| \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
 | |
| \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
 | |
|   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
 | |
|   \globaldefs = 1
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
 | |
|   \setleading{13.2pt}%
 | |
|   %
 | |
|   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
 | |
| }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set default to letter.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \letterpaper
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
 | |
| \catcode`\"=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\~=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\^=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\_=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\|=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\<=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\>=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\+=\other
 | |
| \catcode`\$=\other
 | |
| \def\normaldoublequote{"}
 | |
| \def\normaltilde{~}
 | |
| \def\normalcaret{^}
 | |
| \def\normalunderscore{_}
 | |
| \def\normalverticalbar{|}
 | |
| \def\normalless{<}
 | |
| \def\normalgreater{>}
 | |
| \def\normalplus{+}
 | |
| \def\normaldollar{$}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
 | |
| % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
 | |
| % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
 | |
| %
 | |
| % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
 | |
| % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
 | |
| % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
 | |
| % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
 | |
| %
 | |
| \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
 | |
| % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
 | |
| % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
 | |
| % this is not a problem.
 | |
| \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Turn off all special characters except @
 | |
| % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
 | |
| % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
 | |
| % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
 | |
| 
 | |
| \catcode`\"=\active
 | |
| \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
 | |
| \let"=\activedoublequote
 | |
| \catcode`\~=\active
 | |
| \def~{{\tt\char126}}
 | |
| \chardef\hat=`\^
 | |
| \catcode`\^=\active
 | |
| \def^{{\tt \hat}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \catcode`\_=\active
 | |
| \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
 | |
| % Subroutine for the previous macro.
 | |
| \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \catcode`\|=\active
 | |
| \def|{{\tt\char124}}
 | |
| \chardef \less=`\<
 | |
| \catcode`\<=\active
 | |
| \def<{{\tt \less}}
 | |
| \chardef \gtr=`\>
 | |
| \catcode`\>=\active
 | |
| \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
 | |
| \catcode`\+=\active
 | |
| \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
 | |
| \catcode`\$=\active
 | |
| \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
 | |
| %\catcode 27=\active
 | |
| %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
 | |
| {\catcode`\==\active
 | |
| \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \catcode`+=\active
 | |
| \catcode`\_=\active
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
 | |
| % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
 | |
| % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
 | |
| % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
 | |
| \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
 | |
| 
 | |
| \catcode`\@=0
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
 | |
| \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
 | |
| %{\catcode`\\=\other
 | |
| %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
 | |
| {\catcode`\\=\active
 | |
| @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
 | |
| \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
 | |
| \catcode`\\=\active
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
 | |
| % even after parsing them.
 | |
| @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
 | |
| @let\=@realbackslash
 | |
| @let~=@normaltilde
 | |
| @let^=@normalcaret
 | |
| @let_=@normalunderscore
 | |
| @let|=@normalverticalbar
 | |
| @let<=@normalless
 | |
| @let>=@normalgreater
 | |
| @let+=@normalplus
 | |
| @let$=@normaldollar}
 | |
| 
 | |
| @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
 | |
| @let\=@normalbackslash
 | |
| @let~=@normaltilde
 | |
| @let^=@normalcaret
 | |
| @let_=@normalunderscore
 | |
| @let|=@normalverticalbar
 | |
| @let<=@normalless
 | |
| @let>=@normalgreater
 | |
| @let+=@normalplus
 | |
| @let$=@normaldollar}
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
 | |
| % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
 | |
| @otherifyactive
 | |
| 
 | |
| % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
 | |
| % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
 | |
| % a backslash.
 | |
| %
 | |
| @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
 | |
| @global@let\ = @eatinput
 | |
| 
 | |
| % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
 | |
| % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
 | |
| % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
 | |
| % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
 | |
| % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
 | |
| %
 | |
| @gdef@fixbackslash{%
 | |
|   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
 | |
|   @catcode`+=@active
 | |
|   @catcode`@_=@active
 | |
| }
 | |
| 
 | |
| % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
 | |
| @escapechar = `@@
 | |
| 
 | |
| % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
 | |
| @catcode`@& = @other
 | |
| @catcode`@# = @other
 | |
| @catcode`@% = @other
 | |
| 
 | |
| @c Set initial fonts.
 | |
| @textfonts
 | |
| @rm
 | |
| 
 | |
| 
 | |
| @c Local variables:
 | |
| @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
 | |
| @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
 | |
| @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
 | |
| @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 | |
| @c time-stamp-end: "}"
 | |
| @c End:
 |